JP2020142028A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement of presentations related to a game machine enabling a setting of any one setting value of a plurality of setting values.SOLUTION: A presentation control CPU 120 can display a normal mode specific display 01TM100 that is one mode of prediction modes and a blue mode specific display 01TM100A that is one mode of suggestion modes, at an upper right portion of the screen and at a lower left portion of the screen of an image display device 5, the portions being a common area. There is a case in which a presentation is performed in a [change pattern (i)] for changing the mode of the specific display from the prediction mode to the suggestion mode and there is a case in which a presentation is performed in a [change pattern (ii)] for not changing the mode of the specific display from the prediction mode to the suggestion mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player and displays a character image according to the setting values before and after the setting change. Proposed.

JP-A-2010-200902 (Fig. 12)

With respect to a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values as described in Patent Document 1, the player feels an interest when the effect of suggesting the setting is executed. It is preferable to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The game machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
A game state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (specific display 01TM100, specific display 01TM100A) is provided.
The display mode of the specific display includes a notice mode (normal mode) for notifying that the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state, and a suggestion mode (blue mode) for setting suggestion.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed in a common area (upper right part of the screen and lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5) in the case of displaying in the notice mode and the case of displaying in the suggestion mode. There are cases where one of the notice mode and the suggestion mode is changed to the other mode, and there are cases where the change is not made (the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode [change pattern (i)] and the specific display. There is a [change pattern (ii)] that does not change from the notice mode to the suggestion mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the player pays attention to whether or not the mode of the specific display changes, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) on a common display layer (from the background image). Also has a high priority (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen by the player).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The specific display includes fluctuation information (characters of "CHANGE"), and includes
With the variation mode (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction) of the variation information included in the specific display of the notice mode (characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode). , The variation mode of the variation information (character "CHARCE" included in the specific display 01TM100A of the blue aspect) included in the specific display of the suggestion aspect (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction). A game machine that is characterized by having in common with.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C3.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination by the determination means, the specific display can be displayed in the advance notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12, the variable display that has not been executed (execution is suspended). The specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display), and when the variable display is executed, the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode. (As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the target variable display, the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is changed to the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state, and to pay attention to whether or not the specific display changes from the notice mode to the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination that the determination means controls the advantageous state, the specific display can be displayed in the notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12). The specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display that has not been executed (variable display whose execution is suspended). Image),
Based on the determination by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled again based on the variable display executed after the advantageous state ends (as shown in FIG. 11-9, the hold storage (held)). When any of the variable displays) is "10R probability variation jackpot" (YES in step S01TM2030)), the specific display can be displayed in the above-mentioned notice mode when controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. As shown in 11-15, a specific notice effect [special mode] is executed as a look-ahead notice effect, and the special mode specific display 01TM100F is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden (as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (13), when the jackpot game state is entered, the specific suggestion effect is terminated and the image In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the display device 5, the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) is hidden).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the processing load of the effect control means can be reduced.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode can be displayed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden in response to the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state). The specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 during the period controlled by.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the period during which the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed is long, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the specific display is the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7.
When the specific display of the notice mode is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high even when the specific display of the notice mode is not displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-8, the display result is ". The rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the result is "big hit" is 30%, whereas the rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the display result is "off". Is 5%)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means C9
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8.
A variable display means (CPU103) for executing variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed between the period in which the variable display is executed and the period in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the period in the jackpot gaming state in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-15). In the period (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIG. 11-14) and the period of executing the variable display (the period after T9 shown in FIG. 11-14), in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed), and the display mode of the specific display is not changed during the period when the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the variable display is not executed). During the period of the jackpot game state (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIGS. 11-14), the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is not changed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the specific display can be changed.

The game machine of means A1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
A game state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (specific display 01TM100, specific display 01TM100A) is provided.
The display mode of the specific display includes a notice mode (normal mode) for notifying that the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state, and a suggestion mode (blue mode) for setting suggestion.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed in a common area (upper right part of the screen and lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5) in the case of displaying in the notice mode and the case of displaying in the suggestion mode.
It is possible to change the specific display from one aspect of the notice mode and the suggestion mode to the other mode (as shown in FIG. 11-13, the specific display of the normal mode 01TM100 to the specific display of the blue mode. (Changed to 01TM100A)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in how the specific display is displayed, and the interest in setting suggestion can be improved.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) on a common display layer (from the background image). Also has a high priority (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen by the player).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The specific display includes fluctuation information (characters of "CHANGE"), and includes
With the variation mode (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction) of the variation information included in the specific display of the notice mode (characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode). , The variation mode of the variation information (character "CHARCE" included in the specific display 01TM100A of the blue aspect) included in the specific display of the suggestion aspect (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction). A game machine that is characterized by having in common with.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination by the determination means, the specific display can be displayed in the advance notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12, the variable display that has not been executed (execution is suspended). The specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display), and when the variable display is executed, the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode. (As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the target variable display, the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is changed to the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state, and to pay attention to whether or not the specific display changes from the notice mode to the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination that the determination means controls the advantageous state, the specific display can be displayed in the notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12). The specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display that has not been executed (variable display whose execution is suspended). Image),
Based on the determination by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled again based on the variable display executed after the advantageous state ends (as shown in FIG. 11-9, the hold storage (held)). When any of the variable displays) is "10R probability variation jackpot" (YES in step S01TM2030)), the specific display can be displayed in the above-mentioned notice mode when controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. As shown in 11-15, a specific notice effect [special mode] is executed as a look-ahead notice effect, and the special mode specific display 01TM100F is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden (as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (13), when the jackpot game state is entered, the specific suggestion effect is terminated and the image In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the display device 5, the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) is hidden).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the processing load of the effect control means can be reduced.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode can be displayed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden in response to the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state). The specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 during the period controlled by.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the period during which the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed is long, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the specific display is the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
When the specific display of the notice mode is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high even when the specific display of the notice mode is not displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-8, the display result is ". The rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the result is "big hit" is 30%, whereas the rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the display result is "off". Is 5%)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
A variable display means (CPU103) for executing variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed between the period in which the variable display is executed and the period in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the period in the jackpot gaming state in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-15). In the period (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIG. 11-14) and the period of executing the variable display (the period after T9 shown in FIG. 11-14), in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed), and the display mode of the specific display is not changed during the period when the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the variable display is not executed). During the period of the jackpot game state (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIGS. 11-14), the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is not changed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the specific display can be changed.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
A game state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (specific display 01TM100, specific display 01TM100A) is provided.
The display mode of the specific display includes a notice mode (normal mode) for notifying that the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state, and a suggestion mode (blue mode) for setting suggestion.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed in a common area (upper right part of the screen and lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5) in the case of displaying in the notice mode and the case of displaying in the suggestion mode.
In the first period, the specific display can be displayed in one of the notice mode and the suggestion mode, and in the second period after the first period, in the other mode of the notice mode and the suggestion mode. The specific display can be displayed (in the period of T4 to T14 shown in FIG. 11-11, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (4) to 11-13 (9), the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 And in the lower left part of the screen, the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed, and in the period of T15 to T17 shown in FIG. 11-11, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (11) and (12), the image display device. The specific display 01TM100A in blue mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of 5.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the specific display is displayed in the first period and the second period, and to improve the interest in setting suggestion. Can be done.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) on a common display layer (from the background image). Also has a high priority (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen by the player).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The specific display includes fluctuation information (characters of "CHANGE"), and includes
With the variation mode (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction) of the variation information included in the specific display of the notice mode (characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode). , The variation mode of the variation information (character "CHARCE" included in the specific display 01TM100A of the blue aspect) included in the specific display of the suggestion aspect (animation operation of moving in the band area from the upper left direction to the lower right direction). A game machine that is characterized by having in common with.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination by the determination means, the specific display can be displayed in the advance notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12, the variable display that has not been executed (execution is suspended). The specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display), and when the variable display is executed, the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode. (As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the target variable display, the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is changed to the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state, and to pay attention to whether or not the specific display changes from the notice mode to the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
Variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display),
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination that the determination means controls the advantageous state, the specific display can be displayed in the notice mode before the variable display is executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-12). The specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display that has not been executed (variable display whose execution is suspended). Image),
Based on the determination by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled again based on the variable display executed after the advantageous state ends (as shown in FIG. 11-9, the hold storage (held)). When any of the variable displays) is "10R probability variation jackpot" (YES in step S01TM2030)), the specific display can be displayed in the above-mentioned notice mode when controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. As shown in 11-15, a specific notice effect [special mode] is executed as a look-ahead notice effect, and the special mode specific display 01TM100F is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden (as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (13), when the jackpot game state is entered, the specific suggestion effect is terminated and the image In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the display device 5, the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) is hidden).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the processing load of the effect control means can be reduced.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display of the suggestion mode can be displayed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is hidden in response to the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state). The specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 during the period controlled by.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the period during which the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed is long, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the specific display is the suggestion mode.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
When the specific display of the notice mode is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high even when the specific display of the notice mode is not displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-8, the display result is ". The rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the result is "big hit" is 30%, whereas the rate at which the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed when the display result is "off". Is 5%)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the specific display of the notice mode.

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
A variable display means (CPU103) for executing variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed between the period in which the variable display is executed and the period in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the period in the jackpot gaming state in which the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-15). In the period (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIG. 11-14) and the period of executing the variable display (the period after T9 shown in FIG. 11-14), in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed), and the display mode of the specific display is not changed during the period when the variable display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the variable display is not executed). During the period of the jackpot game state (the period of T5 to T8 shown in FIGS. 11-14), the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is not changed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the specific display can be changed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or The change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when recovering from the power failure during the setting change is shown. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of the 1st movable body initialization process and the 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure exemplifying the effect control command in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side game stop processing in a feature part 40F. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in the low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in a high probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for 10R probability variation jackpot, and (B2) is an explanatory diagram for 2R normal jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example regarding the specific display of the notice mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example regarding the specific display of the suggested mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the super reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a start winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the specific notice effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the start of a fluctuation. (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a specific suggestion effect is executed and an effect mode, which is referred to when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, and (A2) is a table showing a table for determining a 10R probability variation jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, which is referred to in the case, (B) is the table for deciding whether or not the specific notice effect [special aspect] is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows. It is a time chart which shows the display timing of a specific display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a specific display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a specific display. It is a time chart showing the display timing of the special display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a specific display. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect.

(Basic explanation)

First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)

First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)

Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment)

Next, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which the (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the substrate case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Instrument 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is variablely displayed by two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the part 207SG, the light is turned off toward the left side).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting this is connected.

FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-10 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment is the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α and super reach β. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-10, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-24, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 8-11 (B). Judgment table (set value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 8-12 (B). (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). Value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-14 (B). ), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), and FIG. In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A) and the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-11 (A) to 8-16 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in the normal state or the time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in the normal state or the time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1317 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1346 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-16, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 8-11 (A), 8-12 (A), 8-13 (A), 8-14 (A), 8-15 (A), 8-16 (Fig. 8-16). As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIGS. 8-11 (B), 8-12 (B), 8-13 (B), 8-14 (B), 8-15 (B), 8-16 (FIG. 8-16). As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-18, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is set to 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 102 to 1346 is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with reference to the value 32767 as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and 8-16 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-21 (A) and 8-21 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-22. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) and 8-23 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-23 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of the judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and the range is 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-23 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 101 to 350 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the superreach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for small hit determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-24 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total hold storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-24 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-24 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. The α-outlier variation pattern (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and the range is 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of the super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination ratio of any of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize to be stored, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) to 8-24 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation does not matter which of the values 1 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. 8-25 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 207SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes a 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will occur.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 207SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 207SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 207SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A). A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 207SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 207SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 207SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. The reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 207SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 207SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and The storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the buffer number corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage can be stored in association with each buffer number.

In the hold display flag, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored. , When the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. ) Is set, a hold storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the hold storage display. On the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. I will go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 8-26 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the effect symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

In the read-ahead notice setting process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and the hold display flag is set. If there is an entry that has not been entered, depending on whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed based on the symbol specification command or variable category command stored corresponding to the entry. The display mode (display pattern) of the hold storage display is determined. When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the display mode of the hold memory display is decided. Is determined as white circle. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the hold storage display is set in the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see FIG. 8-52) so that the hold storage display becomes the first hold storage display area 207SG005D or the second hold storage display area. It will be displayed on 207SG005U.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the look-ahead notice setting process is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the look-ahead notice effect, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, an operation effect in which a movable body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates, and the like are reserved. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the display notice effect.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-27 (B) and 8-27 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the RAM clear flag is set to 207SGSa010 without executing 207SGSa010. move on.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In the 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. 207SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) Proceed to 207SGSa014 without executing.

In the 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). The recovery process for returning to the state of (207SGSa015) is performed.

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGsa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. 8-36. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 207SGsa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-31 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGsa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read to set the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in an address other than the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the RAM clear flag can be set by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 8-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). When any value of 1 ^ & is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A numerical value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or is stored in the address F001. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 8-33 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 8-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All the segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the hold display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., can see the pachinko game machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only one LED is lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment responds to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. As an example, a mode in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A) to 8-35 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 8-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A), 8-35 (B), and 8-35 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to make the first one. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 8-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 8-34 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the CPU 103 executed the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-39. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first start opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501a; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off in the 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501b; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 207SGS505 (207SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the processing of the 207SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and will be described later. The variable display result determination module (207SGS525) is specified to determine the variable display result.

Following the processing of the 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the processing of the 207SGS511, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (207SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 207SGS504. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS516), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 207SGS 512 of FIG. 8-39 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 207SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 8-41) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 207SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-40 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, thereby playing pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIGS. 8-42, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in 207SGS509 of FIG. 8-39. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the above is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 8-40 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the large hit is not obtained (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. When it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527) and it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When the 207SGS526 determines that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol specification command (207SGS534), and then select and set the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (207SGS535), and set the 207SGS536 to 207SGS536. move on.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 207SG, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 8-24, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. In the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2. When the set value is 3, 1-410 is assigned, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for motion pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of the determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 207SG, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (B), when at least the variable display result is "out of place", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of the 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is "0" (207SGS541). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in the 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined by 207SGS541 that the number of reserved second special figure is "0", and whether or not the number of reserved first special figure is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 8-31 (B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the setting value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. Along with making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 8-36 ( The abnormality may be notified to a player, a clerk of a game hall, or the like by using a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in B) or FIG. 8-37 (B).

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. The embodiment in which the output of the security signal to the field management device is executed only once is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 uses the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-40 (A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 8-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-21 (A) and 8-21 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "big hit C" is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", it may be set to "1", if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "2", and if it is "big hit C", it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition to the pre-determined result of the above, the finalized special symbol is set according to the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small hit symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment stores the determined used set value as one of the game information in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the judgment used setting is illustrated, although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is executed is illustrated. By storing the value in the area that has not been cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102, the judgment used set value and the RAM 102 are determined when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. It may be possible to compare the set value (set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the first address of.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 and 8-41, a form of determining the variable display result by using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. Control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as the result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since it is possible to execute a process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko game machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The setting value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-50 (B) and 8-50 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Generally, the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is used to change or confirm the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to do so (see Figure 8-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-47 and 8-48. FIG. 8-47 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 8-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 8-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect position (second position), and are provided from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The moving body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine due to a moving body error (operation abnormality) such as the moving body 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the coalescing position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 8-32), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 8-48 (A) and 8-48 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 8-48 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-48 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 207SG of the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds always set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensor 207SG331, 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, or it can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as the 207SGS413 The second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (B), the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed among the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed before the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initial stage that are being executed are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

When the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command are not received in the 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-50 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good. By displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can determine that an invalid value is set as a set value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , The power was turned on again in the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where a power failure occurred while changing the set value, and the set value (judgment used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the start address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the set value. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is completed. There are two error notification processes.

Of these, regarding the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the error that occurred when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (CPU 103 is the process of the game control main process 207SGSa031 shown in FIG. 8-30). The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted), and the error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed is described in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Display the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the startup of the above was completed (the CPU 103 received the error specification command transmitted by the processing of the special symbol normal processing 207SGS554 shown in FIG. 8-41). Just do it.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-44, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of, from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to overwrite (update memory) the existing setting value information.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. If it is set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is higher than when it is set, and the decorative symbol is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 8-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the lookahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the lookahead advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the start notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko game machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko game machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-46, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A of the above is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound of the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. A signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as an activation notification at the time of the activation.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, some devices that execute the start notification are common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the machine is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 is used. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the activation notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the setting changed. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, set value confirmation end notification commands, and set value change end notification commands, even if they are received, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the is activated is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are input. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for production (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for production such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (207SGS436) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information, the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information, and the error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to play the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time the variable display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. To do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. If an error designation command has been received, error notification is executed according to the received error designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-52, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the lookahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161). Executes the hold display update process (207SGS454) for updating the number of hold storage displays and the display mode of the hold storage display according to the number of hold storages stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A and the value of the hold display flag. , One of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

Further, when the value of the look-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. When any of the processes of ~ S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (207SGS453). The hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and any of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after activation, the execution of the lookahead advance notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is variablely displayed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the progress of the game. The amount of light of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the factory default state.

Further, although the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of operating a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an effect of emitting light from the game effect lamp 9 and the like may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display result determination table. Regardless of the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value described above is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set.
Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used setting value as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 8-50), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading an inappropriate set value. it can. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display or may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 to 8-42, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the situation), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the embodiment in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to preferably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32).
When it is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIGS. 8-33) in which the set value can be confirmed.
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is notified in the information display unit where the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed, and thus it is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed. Different part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that the game is in the set state or the confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display recognizable as the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit displays a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A)). A part that blinks all the segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the setting is performed. Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-31 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 has a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B)). If an error occurs above the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area in which a variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A game machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or greater than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if there is no display that can identify the occurrence of an error in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), even when recovering from a power failure during setting change, the first A part that blinks all the segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the error is.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming the set value There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play games using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting prize opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value imparting means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 8-27 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B)). When a setting value error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 8-35 (A) and 8-36 (B)). As shown in the above, in both the case of displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case of displaying the occurrence of an abnormal error, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display Part using part 207SG029D)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which a set value is stored, and the error information is different from the set value information. Can be easily recognized.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part composed of 10 segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means constitutes each display unit when the state of the game machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON). All of the display units are turned on to be in a fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit. The part where all the segments that make up the 207SG029D are turned on and off repeatedly (blinking)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without the full lighting display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-32, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed after the execution of 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the set value can be confirmed quickly.

The embodiment of the present embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable,
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to the setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the clear switch and the lock switch are activated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable,
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, the effect control CPU 120 controls the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. If it can be executed before the control is executed and the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, the first movable). In the body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after the non-detection self-motion control is completed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the set state or the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the set state or the confirmation state is terminated when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), the first movable unit is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the body initialization process is not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control by the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is executed (for example, FIG. 8-FIG. As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command by the effect control CPU 120 is completed, and the second movable body initialization is completed. If a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. And the part that executes in order)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-to-face initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the set state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Although the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment composed of the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the case where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state) is the first. Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is one.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on to turn on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. 1 Display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display a variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the display mode is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Although the embodiment in which one segment is lit and all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinking is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. The blinking of all segments may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set to different modes from those during the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the present invention has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, but is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention illustrates a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical value of the small hit determination value) regardless of the gaming state and the set value. The range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 8-53 (A) and 8-53 (B) are modified examples. As shown in the above, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the game state and the set value.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 8-53 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 8-53 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form of setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-54, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIGS. 8-54, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 8-54, the setting value 1 is 64990, the setting value 2 is 64974, and the setting value 3 is 64954). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or more than the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is 65208 or more, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko game machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-53, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the large hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value is illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 8-55 and FIG. 8-56, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a numerical range continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 8-55, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 8-56, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the fluctuation special figure, but the determination value included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, the numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60,000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60,000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and determining whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, as in the above-mentioned feature unit 207SG, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) and is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, a form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 207SG. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

(Explanation of feature 10F)
Next, the feature portion 10F will be described. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-1, the same processing as in FIG. 8-32 is designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-32 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-32 is executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-2, the same processing as in FIG. 8-33 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 8-33 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off (207SGSa111; N) in the 207SGSa111, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 8-33 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-lid opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) for measuring the opening time of the V lid controlled by the open state and the closed state. In the V probability variation game machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round among the plurality of rounds. The area where the V lid is open is called the V winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-lid opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-lid is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed from the open state (winning in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 uses a normal fluctuation time timer to measure the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the jackpot is controlled at the start of the jackpot. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as other timers other than the above-mentioned timer. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines in the game stop start process whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Resumes timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the end. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the time counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

A game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol has been described, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called second type game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on a game ball winning (V prize) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (a type-two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is accepted by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class big hit game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. , The timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls have been executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, even if the same control is executed even in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in a favorable state, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timing of.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or a missed display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result which is advantageous to the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is favorable to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 10F)
As described above, the feature portion 10F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
A variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 11F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the game machine of (2) or (3) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
A variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring an execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that clocks by a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) that measures the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Fig. Fluctuation stop period Stops the timer period and restarts the time counting of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation status).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by this.

(4) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 13F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that clocks by a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) that measures the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Fig. Fluctuation stop period Stops the timer period and restarts the time counting of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation status).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by this.

(4) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
A variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 40F)
Next, the feature unit 40F will be described. The feature unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise due to static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram illustrating an effect control command in the feature unit 40F in the present embodiment. In FIG. 10-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) described above. The commands added are command F1XXH and command F2XXXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) in which the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value among the determination results at the time of winning.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 10-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timings by the CPU 103. Upon receiving the various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on the fluctuation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the displayed decorative pattern. Further, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constantly small symbol in a reduced form of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to constantly display the variation of the small symbol to be displayed.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a symbol for variable display, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the normal symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is fluctuating, and is fluctuated by a constant operation in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as an image display device 5. Is displayed. When the fourth symbol is variablely displayed, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body displays all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

(About processing based on the designated command while the big winning opening is open)
During the jackpot game, a round game that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 into an open state (first state) that is advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the command designated during the opening of the big winning opening.

(About processing based on the 1st start opening prize designation command and the 2nd start opening prize designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start port winning designation command, so that the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 is stored. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start port winning designation command, and is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on the symbol specification command and variation type specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning hold change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect of emitting a lamp provided around the first starting port when a starting winning is generated. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a flash effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamps emit light in different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 emits red light when the jackpot expectation is high, white light when the expectation is not so high, and the lottery is lost or the deviation is not accompanied by reach. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the flash effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that control may be made so that sound is not output only by light emission.

The hold change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning is generated to a mode different from the usual one. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for the hold change effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest expectation of big hit, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of losing the lottery or the deviation fluctuation without reach. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the hold change effect at the time of winning. In addition, you may control so that the sound is not output only by the hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command to execute the pending change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that only one of the flash effect at the time of winning and the pending change effect at the time of winning may be executed. Further, at the time of winning a prize, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by the output of the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 40F will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 40F. In FIG. 10-2, the same processing as in FIG. 8-43 is designated by the same reference numerals and a part of description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 10-2, the processes related to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIGS. 8-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The setting value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412). In the set value-related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value-related notification process in the 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3.

After the sub-side game stop process is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412 and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS427.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the feature unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In the 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 controls to display the variation of the decorative symbol or constantly display the variation of the small symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented from executing. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is received. If it is determined that the designated command is not received while the large winning opening is open, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the designated command is received while the large winning opening is open, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for opening the big winning opening while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation type specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the effect control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the game machine at the time of shipment from the factory. .. When transmitting a test command, various test commands are transmitted with a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command has been received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the process based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 10-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the process ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the variation pattern specification command, it discards the variation pattern specification command. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so that the variation pattern specification command is used. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the grand prize opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the grand prize opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when the setting is changed, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received while the setting is being changed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as a winning lamp or an image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled in the setting confirmation state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. By doing so, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command such as 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 10-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting to display the image notifying that the setting is in the setting change state is set, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on, set to display an image notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state. In this way, it can be shown that the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like It is possible to prevent the predetermined production means of the above from malfunctioning.

As shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 10-3, the control according to the test command is executed even when the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this way, it is possible to execute the operation of a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command reception buffer for each command to be transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of analyzing the commands in order and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded.
Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, even if an effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the process based on the effect control command is not executed. explained. However, the process based on the reception of the effect control command while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be executed internally. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on receiving other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is displayed in appearance. Regarding the sound, the channel other than the channel that outputs the notification sound in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed. However, when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning have been described as a predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, an operating means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as a predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operating means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control to discard the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It may be controlled not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the lamp provided in the game machine may be made to emit light or the sound may be output from the speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command is executed has been described. However, the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of a start winning prize, the command related to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted. The advance notice effect may be executed based on the above. In such a case, even if a command related to the fluctuation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the lottery for the advance notice to be executed may be executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various notices may not be executed by determining that the notice cannot be executed at the timing of actually determining whether or not the notice can be executed. In addition, when executing the look-ahead notice effect in the continuous fluctuation display other than the time of winning, the lottery of the notice is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the fluctuation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice based on the received command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to restrict the reception of another irregular command thereafter. Good.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). .. The gaming machine in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 includes, for example, a determination random number value generating means capable of generating a determination random value within a predetermined numerical range for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state. , It is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set in the game machine. , It is conceivable to make the probability of controlling the advantageous state different by making the number of advantageous state determination values different for each set value set in the game machine. However, when the number of advantageous state judgment values is different for each set value set in the game machine in this way, if the advantageous state judgment value is set over a plurality of numerical values, it matches the judgment random value advantageous state judgment value. Since it is necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to perform the determination a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state becomes large. The configuration according to the means 1 to the means 21 is made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state. To do.

The gaming machine described in means 1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5).
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means is provided.
The advantageous state determining means reads out the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41). 207SGS550 process), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range. , Is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means matches (for example, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol normal processing 207SG556 shown in FIGS. 8-41). In the process of, the part that sets the display result judgment table according to the set value read in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means, so that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is used. It is possible to prevent an inappropriate judgment from being made.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as the determination used set value information (for example, the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 8-41). In the process of 207SGS566, the set value in the process of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value).
A collation that can collate every predetermined period whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means. It is characterized in that the CPU 103 further includes means (for example, in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 8-41, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The collation means collates each time it determines whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state for the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 displays a variable display. The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 every time it is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the collation is performed every time the advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state, it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to the means 3 or the means 4.
When the collation results of the collation means are not the same, an error notification means capable of executing an error notification that the set value information is abnormal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an error notification process (207SGS439)). The image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 according to the error) by executing the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value information is abnormal, and it is possible to quickly deal with the abnormal set value information.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The game control means controls the game to an incapable game state when the collation results of the collation means are not the same, and also provides error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result of the 207SGS552, the process proceeds to loop processing. And the part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and sends an error specification command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the error notification process (207SGS439) from the CPU 103. A part that determines whether or not an error specification command has been received, and executes error notification according to the received error specification command when an error specification command is received)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to a determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display, the variable display result determination module is used. Use to determine variable display results),
When the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means can be stored as the pending storage means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the start winning determination process in FIG. 8-39). The part that executes the processing of 207SGS510) and
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, it is possible to predetermine whether or not it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on the hold memory (for example, the winning prize shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 8-40). The part that executes the hourly random value judgment process) and
With more
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to a process for determining whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). The part that judges the variable display result using the variable display result judgment module also in the random number value judgment process)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the pre-determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means, and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
With more
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination that the special state determination means controls the special state (for example, the game control means is special based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit. Figure The part that updates the process flag value to 8 "and controls it to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is continuously common from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination with 32767 as the small hit reference value. The part that is set as the common numerical range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and the special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-17 to 8-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variable special figure. When is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display. A part that sets a display result judgment table according to the read set value and judges whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature unit, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In some cases, since the process of setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information can be shared, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 8.
For the set value having the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the pachinko game If the set value set for machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control only the common numerical range out of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range in an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5).
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 10.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. Game control that can control the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is a number, or the special state corresponding to the special number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The part from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example,. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the jackpot numerical range is a portion set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 11.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
When the advantageous state determining means determines that the advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous state can be controlled, and when the special state determining means determines that the special state is controlled, the special state can be controlled. A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as a small hit reference value regardless of the set value. The part where the range of is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit gaming state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether or not to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, they are set to be in a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-17). As shown in 8-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to 32767, which is a common value, as the small hit reference value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 12.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of the set value set by the setting means so as to be in the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the small hit The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always used as the small hit reference. The value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set as a small hit reference value and is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special state judgment value is changed according to the set value. Since the numerical range of can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 13.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantage determination value and a disadvantage determination value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control the advantageous state, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probability variation state. part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The set value set by the setting means and the same number are set regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range from the value (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1: 1020 to 1346. In a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always small regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and the gaming state are in the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since the same numerical range may be specified, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical value of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range, the process of determining whether or not to control the advantageous state is performed. The load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times based on the range, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the second common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to perform once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5).
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting value) that is not set by the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to (values 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and 8). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
One of the setting values of the plurality of stages having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) and
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5).
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). Non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6), which is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. ) And is set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and 8). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 16.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Has been set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The part from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The same number of the special state determination values is set in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, FIGS. 8-53 and 8). As shown in −54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 judgment values in succession to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is used to determine the advantageous state. Whether or not the value or the value is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value When determining to control to an advantageous state or a special state based on (whether or not there is), the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is the minimum value in the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not the value is between and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. By determining whether or not the value is between the value and the maximum value in the numerical range of the special state determination value, it is possible to determine at once whether or not to control the advantageous state or the special state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control and the processing load for determining whether or not to control a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 17.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so that it is a continuous second common numerical range.
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value. 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values).
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit gaming state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether or not to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit determination is made. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the small hit. The numerical range of the judgment value is small 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value. The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the first reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 18.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control the advantageous state, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is used as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probability variation state. part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same as the set value set by the setting means regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-). As shown in 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020-1346 or 1020-1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always set as the small hit reference value of 3267 to 33094 regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, 32767 is always the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The part set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit is If the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value to be set, and the variable special figure is the second. If it is a special symbol, regardless of the set value, 32767 is always set as a small hit reference value as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421),
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit gaming state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether or not to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the variable special figure is the first special symbol. In some cases, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655. However, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the range, 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set to 32767 to 33421. The part set in the numerical range of)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set by the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value (value of 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The first common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the jackpot reference value. The part from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 8-55). And as shown in FIG. 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value. Part),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical value of the small hit determination value. In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of the means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, changing the setting value shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 8-32). The part that executes the process) and
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 8-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different because the number of big hit judgment values is different according to
As the advantageous state determination value, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). And the non-common numerical value range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6)). Numerical range) and is set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and FIG. As shown in 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value. ),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from the second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the part is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

[Explanation of feature 01TM]
Next, the feature unit 01TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned (Explanation of the feature unit 207SG), the game machine whose set value can be changed is controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, high accuracy / high base state) and then changes. The look-ahead notice effect that announces the jackpot expectation of the variable display (variable display that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) for which the display execution is suspended and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value are common. It is characterized by being executed in the area.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) to 11-1 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is If the target is variable display, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of non-probability change is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/290) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/290) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of low probability is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/270) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/270) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/260) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/260) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the low accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) to 11-1 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) to 11-1 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

FIG. 11-2 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) to 11-2 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high probability is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is If the target is variable display, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/60) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/60) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/58) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/58) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/56) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/56) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/54) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/54) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/52) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/52) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/50) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) to 11-2 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2 (A) to 14-2 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is separately used. The jackpot may be determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. ..

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Big hit type judgment)
FIG. 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 11-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table [for the 2nd special symbol]. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 01TM of the present embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 01TM of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, "normal jackpot" (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state to shift to the low probability / high base state, and the jackpot After the game is over, high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed, and a "probability variation jackpot" is set to shift to a high-accuracy / high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "2R jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "10R big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [100 times]" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation jackpot [next time]" are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the types of "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]" and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]", high accuracy control and time saving control are performed again after the end of the jackpot game state. Is executed, so that the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

For example, in the jackpot game state by "4R normal jackpot [100 times]", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds). It is an open jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game state, it shifts to the low accuracy / high base state, and the time saving control executed after that is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In addition, in the big hit game state by "10R probability change big hit [next time]", the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds), which is normally opened. It is a big hit, and after the end of the big hit game state, it shifts to the high accuracy / high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that continue until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. This is the type of jackpot to be executed.

In addition, in the feature part 01TM of this embodiment, the embodiment in which four types of jackpots are provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are three or less, or five. More than one type may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 104 are assigned to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 284 are assigned to "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". Is assigned to. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol], when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 105 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which set value is set. ing. Similarly, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the jackpot type determination table regardless of which set value is set.

(Variation pattern judgment)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is "missing", and the fluctuation display result is set to "big hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots, which is used when is determined in advance, is prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state will be described. Regarding the game state, it is pre-determined that the [for out-of-order] fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined that the variation display result is "off" and that the variation display result is "10R probability variation jackpot". [10R probability variation big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table used when, and [2R normal jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the fluctuation display result is "2R normal jackpot" And are prepared in advance.

[For loss] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern is for each fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach", "normal reach out of reach", and "super reach out of [battle draw]". Random value for determination A predetermined random value within the range that MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

The "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variation display result becomes "out of reach" after the variation display is started is stopped and displayed. Since the effect that the reach is established is not executed, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "non-reach off" is the other effect that executes the effect that the reach is established when the variation display result is "out of reach". It is shorter than the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach loss”, “super reach loss”).

[For 10R probability variation jackpot] In the variation pattern judgment table, the variation pattern of "straight jackpot", "normal reach jackpot", and "super reach jackpot [battle victory]" varies with respect to each variation pattern. Random value for pattern determination A predetermined random value within the range that MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value. Further, in the [2R normal jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot [battle defeat]", a predetermined range within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination can take. A random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" is a variation in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result becomes the "big hit" is stopped and displayed without going through the reach establishment after the variation display is started. It is a pattern. Since the effect that the reach is established is not executed, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" is the other variation that executes the effect that the reach is established when the variation display result is the "big hit". It is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot").

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later after the reach state is established. It will be fixedly stopped.

In the present embodiment, the reach state is established in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach ("super reach loss [battle draw]", "super reach jackpot [battle victory]", and "super reach jackpot [battle defeat]"). Later, as a super reach effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the ally character and the enemy character have won the big hit by performing a battle, and if the big hit has been won, the big hit type. To.

Then, when the final display result is "off", the effect of drawing the ally character to the enemy character (battle effect [draw]) is executed. When the final display result is "10R probability variation jackpot", the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character (battle effect [victory]) is executed, and when the final display result is "2R normal jackpot", An effect in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character (battle effect [defeat]) is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is determined in the high accuracy / high base state, if the fluctuation display result is "off", the ally character draws to the enemy character. By executing the effect, the player is notified that the control in the high accuracy / high base state is continued. In addition, when the variable display result is "10R probability variation jackpot", the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed, so that the high accuracy / high base state is continuously controlled after the jackpot game state ends. Notify that it will be done. In addition, when the variable display result is "2R normal jackpot", the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, and the state shifts to the low probability / high base state after the jackpot game state ends (high). It is not controlled to the certainty / high base state, but is controlled to the low certainty / high base state).

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the [for off] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 898 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Is assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern, 899 to 967 is assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern, and 968 to 997 is assigned to the "super reach out of [battle draw]" fluctuation pattern. Is assigned to. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 898 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 899 to 967 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off [Battle Draw]". In this way, when the display result is "off", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), in the [10R probability variation jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 69 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "direct jackpot", 70 to 99 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 100 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot [battle victory]". Assigned to a pattern. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 69 are assigned to the "straight jackpot" fluctuation pattern, 70 to 99 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 100 to 997 are assigned to the "super hit" fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Reach jackpot [Battle victory]". As described above, when the display result is "10R probability variation jackpot", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), in the [2R normal jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Jackpot [Battle Defeat]". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot [battle defeat]". In this way, when the display result is "2R probability variation jackpot", the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of the set value.

(Outline of specific notice production)
Fluctuation display Fluctuation display In this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the display result of the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended is a big hit. , It is possible to execute a specific notice effect. That is, the specific advance notice effect is an example of the advance notice effect that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state, and is an example of the look-ahead advance notice effect.

In this example, as the specific advance notice effect, there are a specific advance notice effect of a normal mode and a specific advance notice effect of a special aspect. In the following description, the specific advance notice effect of the normal aspect may be referred to as the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect], and the specific advance notice effect of the special aspect may be referred to as the specific advance notice effect [special aspect]. In addition, the specific display corresponding to the specific notice effect may be referred to as the specific display of the notice mode.

Next, a specific example of the specific advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (A). FIG. 11-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the specific advance notice effect is executed.

When the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed, the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode (a strip extending from the upper left side of the screen toward the lower right side of the screen) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Image) is displayed. The specific display 01TM100 includes the characters "CHANGE" notifying that the jackpot expectation is high, and is superimposed and displayed on the background image at that time. In this example, the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed in a white display color corresponding to the normal mode.

Further, when the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed, the special display 01TM100F (extending from the upper left side of the screen toward the lower right side of the screen) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. A strip-shaped image) is displayed. In the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect, the display result of the variation display of the variation display of any one of the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended is " 10R Probability variation jackpot ”is included, and the characters“ next FEVER ”are included, and the variation display variation display variation display is superimposed and displayed on the background image at that time. In this example, the special mode specific display 01TM100F is displayed in a display color different from that of the normal mode specific display 01TM100 (for example, a rainbow color corresponding to the special mode).

Here, the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) has a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and is in front of the player. It is displayed in a superposed manner so that it can be seen). In addition, the characters included in this specific display (for example, the characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode and the characters of "next FEVER" included in the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) are included in the band area. You may perform a moving animation action. Specifically, the animation operation in which the characters "CHANGE" move from the upper left to the lower right along the direction of the band within the area of the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode, and the characters "next FEVER" are special modes. The animation operation or the like of moving from the upper left direction to the lower right direction along the direction of the band may be executed in the area of the specific display 01TM100F. By such an animation operation, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the specific advance notice effect (specific display of the advance notice mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 are executed. The specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode will be displayed on the unit. The specific display 01TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 decorates the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol is executed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. .. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 3. Therefore, "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 01TM031 displays the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM021 displays three second hold displays 01TM020.

In the present embodiment, the area where the specific display 01TM100 is displayed in the upper right part of the screen does not overlap with the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. Therefore, the visibility of the specific display 01TM100 is not deteriorated by the second small symbol of the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. Similarly, the area where the specific display 01TM100 at the lower left of the screen is displayed does not overlap with the active display area 01TM031. Therefore, the active display 01TM030 of the active display area 01TM031 does not reduce the visibility of the specific display 01TM100.

In the present embodiment, a part of the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 and the area where the specific display 01TM100 at the lower left of the screen is displayed overlap, but the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 The first reserved memory number has a higher priority than the specific display 01TM100 at the lower left of the screen (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the specific display 01TM100 and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player). Is superimposed and displayed. Further, although a part of the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 and the area where the specific display 01TM100 is displayed in the upper right part of the screen overlap, the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 is overlapped. Is superimposed and displayed on the specific display 01TM100 with a higher priority than the specific display 01TM100 in the upper right part of the screen (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the specific display 01TM100 and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front of the player). There is.

(Outline of specific suggestion production)
Next, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value will be described. The effect control CPU 120 receives a set value designation command for designating the set set value from the CPU 103, and executes a setting suggestion effect according to the set value specified by the set value designation command. In the present embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value.

In this example, the specific suggestion effect includes a blue mode specific suggestion effect, a red mode specific suggestion effect, and a golden mode specific suggestion effect. The specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect may be referred to as the specific suggestion effect [blue aspect], the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect may be referred to as the specific suggestion effect [red aspect], and the specific suggestion effect of the golden aspect may be referred to as the specific suggestion effect. It may be referred to as [golden aspect]. In addition, the specific display corresponding to the specific suggestion effect may be referred to as the specific display of the suggestion mode.

Next, a specific example of the specific suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (B). FIG. 11-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the specific suggestion effect is executed.

When the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed, the blue mode specific display 01TM100A (a strip extending from the upper left side of the screen toward the lower right side of the screen) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Image) is displayed. The specific display 01TM100A is displayed in a blue mode suggesting that there is a high possibility that the set value is an odd set value (the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5") (see FIG. 11-10 for details). ), Includes the characters "CHANGE" to notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and is superimposed and displayed on the background image at that time.

Further, when the specific suggestion effect [red mode] is executed, the specific display 01TM100B of the red mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The specific display 01TM100B is displayed in a red mode suggesting that there is a high possibility that the set value is an even set value (the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6") (see FIG. 11-10 for details). ), Includes the characters "CHANGE" to notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and is superimposed and displayed on the background image at that time.

Further, when the specific suggestion effect [golden mode] is executed, the specific display 01TM100C of the golden mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The specific display 01TM100C is displayed in a golden mode suggesting that it is a high set value (the set value is either "5" or "6") (see FIG. 11-10 for details), and the jackpot expectation is high. It contains the characters "CHANGE" to notify the above, and is superimposed and displayed on the background image at that time.

Here, the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode, specific display 01TM100B of the red mode, specific display 01TM100C of the gold mode) has a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen from the player's side. The characters included in this specific display (for example, the characters "CHANGE" included in the blue mode specific display 01TM100A, the characters "CHANGE" included in the red mode specific display 01TM100B, and the golden mode specific display 01TM100C are included. The character "CHANGE") may perform an animation operation that moves within the area of the band. For example, an animation operation in which the characters "CHANGE" move from the upper left direction to the lower right in the area of the specific display 01TM100A in the blue aspect, and the characters "CHANGE" move in the upper left direction in the area of the specific display 01TM100B in the red aspect. An animation operation of moving from the upper left direction to the lower right direction, an animation operation in which the characters "CHANGE" move from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the area of the specific display 01TM100C in the golden aspect may be executed. By such an animation operation, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the specific suggestion effect (specific display of the suggestion mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the production image of the super reach effect (in this example, the battle effect [victory] in which the ally character 01TM050 wins the enemy character 01TM060) is displayed. , When the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed at the timing when the second small symbol is stopped and displayed (rocking stop) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The blue mode specific display 01TM100A will be displayed in the section and the lower left part of the screen. The specific display 01TM100A is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, in the active display area 01TM031, the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

As shown above, the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display period of the special symbol, and at the timing before being notified whether or not a big hit occurs, the specific display of the notice mode (specific display of the normal mode). It is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect in which 01TM100, 01TM100F in a special mode) is displayed, and the suggestion mode is specified at a timing after being notified whether or not a big hit will occur during the variable display period of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect in which the display (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode, specific display 01TM100C in gold mode) is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) and 11-5 (B), the specific display of the notice mode displayed based on the execution of the specific notice effect (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, identification of the special mode). The display 01TM100F) and the specific display of the suggestion mode displayed based on the execution of the specific suggestion effect (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode, specific display 01TM100B of the red mode, specific display 01TM100C of the gold mode) are common. It is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 which is the area of.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) displayed based on the execution of the specific notice effect is a background image. It is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that it can be seen from the player), and the first reserved memory special display area 01TM015 1st reserved storage number, 2nd reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 has a lower priority than the 2nd reserved storage number (1st reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 1st reserved storage number, 2nd reserved storage number special The display layer is lower than the second reserved memory number of the display area 01TM025 and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the back), and the first reserved memory number of the special display area 01TM015, the first 2 Hold storage number The display is superimposed on the second hold storage number of the special display area 01TM025.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the specific display of the suggestion mode displayed based on the execution of the specific suggestion effect (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode, specific display 01TM100B of the red mode, golden mode). The specific display 01TM100C) is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). The first reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 and the first reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 are lower than the second reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015. The first reserved storage number special display area in the mode in which the display layer is lower than the second reserved storage number of the storage number and the second reserved storage number 01TM025 and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the back). It is superimposed and displayed with the first reserved storage number of 01TM015 and the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025.

In this way, the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) and the specific display of the suggestive mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode, specific display 01TM100B of the red mode, identification of the gold mode). The display 01TM100C) is displayed on a common display layer. This common display layer is a display layer higher than the background image, and is larger than the first reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 and the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025. Is also a lower display layer. According to such a configuration, the display control unit 123 has a common display layer for displaying the specific display of the notice mode and the case of displaying the specific display of the suggestion mode, and the characters target the common area. Since the display control such as the above can be executed, the complexity of the display control can be suppressed. As a result, the processing load of the display control unit 123 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) is reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display control unit 123 uses the characters included in the specific display of the advance notice mode (the characters "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, and the "next FEVER" included in the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode. It is possible to execute an animation operation in which the character (character) moves from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the band area. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control unit 123 includes characters included in the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in the red mode, and "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100C in the gold mode. It is possible to execute an animation operation in which a character) moves in the area of the band from the upper left direction to the lower right direction.

As described above, the characters included in the specific display of the notice mode (the characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, the characters of "next FEVER" included in the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) and the suggestive mode The variation mode is shared with the characters included in the specific display (characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode, the specific display 01TM100B in the red mode, and the specific display 01TM100C in the gold mode) (in any case). Also, the animation operation that the character moves from the upper left direction to the lower right direction is executed in the area of the band). According to such a configuration, the display control of characters and the like may be executed in a common variation mode for a common area between the specific display of the advance notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, which complicates the display control. Can be suppressed. As a result, the processing load of the display control unit 123 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) is reduced.

In addition, the fluctuation speed (band area) of the characters included in the specific display of the notice mode (characters of "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode and characters of "next FEVER" included in the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode). Characters included in the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode, golden mode) and the character movement speed in the animation operation in which the character moves from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. Display control is also possible by sharing the fluctuation speed (character movement speed in the animation operation in which the character moves from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the band area) of the character "CHANGE" included in the specific display 01TM100C. It is possible to suppress the complexity of. As a result, the processing load of the display control unit 123 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) is reduced.

(Super reach production)
In FIG. 11-6, after being controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and the super reach effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode]. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 in the case of.

In FIGS. 11-6 (1) and (2), the target variation display result is determined to be either "missing" or "big hit", and the variation pattern accompanied by super reach (battle draw, battle defeat, battle victory). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it is determined to be any of.

11-6 (A3) and 11-6 (A4) show the image display device 5 when the target variation display result is determined to be "missing" and the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach loss [battle draw]". It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image which is displayed in FIG. 11-6 (B3) and (B4), in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when it is determined as "big hit [battle defeat]", and FIGS. 11-6 (C3) and 11-6 (C4) are target variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the result is determined as "10R probability variation jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is determined as "super reach loss [battle victory]".

Further, in this example, the target fluctuation display result shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B3) and (B4) is determined to be "2R normal jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach jackpot [battle defeat]". The target variation display result shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C3) and (C4) is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", and the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach loss [battle victory]". In some cases, it is assumed that the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 11-9), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (1), the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and the specific display 01TM100 is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 sets the reach state by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of "4" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the display device 5. At this time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is continued. That is, also in the second small symbol display area 5l2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5r2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The second small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 01TM031 displays the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM021 displays four second hold displays 01TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (2), after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the specific advance effect [normal mode] at the timing of developing the super reach in the fluctuation pattern, and the image display device. The specific display 01TM100 displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of No. 5 is erased, and the battle effect is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060 are displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative symbols of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are hidden (erased).

When the fluctuation display result is determined to be "off" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach out [battle draw]", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 , The image display device 5 displays the production image of the battle effect [draw] in which the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060 draw, and displays the characters "draw" in the center of the screen. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5 (in this example, "454". ) Is displayed as a stop (swing stop).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A4), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the display device 5, the combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (in this example, "454") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A3) and 11-6 (A4), the specific display of the suggestion mode is not displayed based on the decision not to execute the specific suggestion effect. In this way, after the specific notice effect is executed (after the specific display of the notice mode is displayed), when the specific notice effect ends (when the specific display of the notice mode is hidden), the specific notice effect is displayed as it is. And, without executing any of the specific suggestion effects (without displaying the specific display itself), a draw effect is executed to notify that the display result is "off".

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the development to super reach (execution of the battle effect), and then hides (erases) the decorative symbols. Even if the symbol confirmation specification command is received, the second small symbol is confirmed and stopped without displaying the decorative symbol again in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. Not limited to this form, with the development to super reach (execution of battle production), after the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are once hidden (once erased), The combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is "off" (for example, "454", which is the same as the combination of the second small symbols) may be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the fluctuation display result is determined to be "2R normal jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach jackpot [battle defeat]", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B3), for effect control. The CPU 120 displays a production image of a battle effect [defeat] in which the ally character 01TM050 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM060, and displays the characters "defeat" in the center of the screen. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 (in this example, "135". ) Is displayed as a stop (swing stop).

At this time, when the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The blue mode specific display 01TM100A is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player). ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B4), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the display device 5, the combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“135” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result is "2R normal jackpot" is fixedly stopped.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B3) and 11-6 (B4), the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed based on the decision to execute the specific suggestion effect. In this way, after the specific notice effect is executed (after the specific display of the notice mode is displayed), the specific display of the notice mode is hidden, and then the specific suggestion effect is executed (specification of the suggestion mode). The display is displayed), and a defeat effect is executed to notify that the display result is "2R normal jackpot".

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the development to super reach (execution of the battle effect), and then hides (erases) the decorative symbols. Even if the symbol confirmation specification command is received, the second small symbol is confirmed and stopped without displaying the decorative symbol again in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. Not limited to this form, with the development to super reach (execution of battle production), after the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are once hidden (once erased), Even if the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is "2R normal jackpot" (for example, "135" which is the same as the combination of the second small symbol) is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Good.

When the fluctuation display result is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach jackpot [battle victory]", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C3), for effect control. The CPU 120 displays a production image of the battle effect [victory] in which the ally character 01TM050 wins the enemy character 01TM060, and displays the character "victory" in the center of the screen. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 (in this example, "777". ) Is displayed as a stop (swing stop).

At this time, when the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The blue mode specific display 01TM100A is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player). ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C4), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the display device 5, the combination (“777” in this example) of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result is "10R probability variation jackpot" is fixedly stopped.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C3) and 11-6 (C4), the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed based on the decision to execute the specific suggestion effect. Therefore, if the specific display of the notice mode is hidden after the specific notice effect is executed (after the specific display of the notice mode is displayed), the specific suggestion effect is executed after that (specific display of the suggestion mode). Is displayed), and a winning effect is being executed to notify that the display result is "10R probability variation jackpot".

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the development to super reach (execution of the battle effect), and then hides (erases) the decorative symbols. Even if the symbol confirmation specification command is received, the second small symbol is confirmed and stopped without displaying the decorative symbol again in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. Not limited to this form, with the development to super reach (execution of battle production), after the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are once hidden (once erased), Even if the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is "10R probability variation jackpot" (for example, "777" which is the same as the combination of the second small symbol) is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Good.

(Production decision processing at the time of starting prize)
FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-7 in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the effect determination process at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of commands at the time of start winning based on the occurrence of a start winning to the second start winning opening (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, etc.). And it is confirmed whether or not the second reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S01TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved among the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will occur and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal reach is achieved, whether or not the super reach is achieved, and the like based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. Further, the second hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and second hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Judge whether or not it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S01TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received (YES in step S01TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not either the specific advance notice effect or the specific suggestion effect is being executed. (Step S01TM1010). If either the specific notice effect or the specific suggestion effect is being executed (when the specific display is displayed) (YES in step S01TM1010), the process ends as it is.

If neither the specific advance notice effect nor the specific suggestion effect is being executed (when the specific display is not displayed) (NO in step S01TM1010), is the effect control CPU 120 having 2 or more second reserved storage numbers? Is determined (step S01TM1020). When the number of second reserved storages is 1 or less (NO in step S01TM1020), the process ends as it is.

When the number of second reserved storages is 2 or more (YES in step S01TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 performs any second reserved storage other than the second reserved storage corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning. It is determined based on the symbol designation command whether or not the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined as "big hit" (step S01TM1030). That is, in this step S01TM1030, the display result of the variation display of any of the second special symbols, which is executed before the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning, becomes a "big hit". Whether or not it is confirmed based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning.

If the judgment result at the time of the start winning is determined to be "big hit" for any of the second holding memories other than the second holding memory corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning (YES in step S01TM1030), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, when the display result of any of the fluctuation displays executed before the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (YES in step S01TM1030), The process ends without executing the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] corresponding to the start prize.

If the determination result at the time of starting prize is not determined to be "big hit" for any of the second reserved storage other than the second reserved memory corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning (NO in step S01TM1030), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 11-8) of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] (step S01TM1040). That is, when the display result of any of the fluctuation displays executed before the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning is not a "big hit" (NO in step S01TM1030), the effect is produced. Based on the lottery, the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] corresponding to the start winning can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode], the judgment result at the time of the start winning (at the time of winning specified by the symbol designation command whose reception was confirmed in step S01TM1000 this time). A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is assigned according to the determination result).

If the winning judgment result is "missing" (that is, if the winning judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is not executed at a rate of 95%. It is decided that the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, when the winning judgment result is "big hit" (that is, when the winning judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] at a rate of 70%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] at a rate of 30%. In this way, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is 30%, whereas when the winning judgment result is "missing". The rate at which the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed is 5%. When the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the specific notice effect [normal mode] is not executed, so that the player can use the specific notice effect [normal mode]. Will be interested in whether or not is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] (step S01TM1050). If it is not decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] (NO in step S01TM1050), the process ends as it is.

When it is determined to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] (YES in step S01TM1050), the effect control CPU 120 sets the look-ahead counter (step S01TM1060) and ends the process as it is.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the variable display period and production contents of the special symbol A variation display of a special symbol is executed based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, super reach, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103). In addition, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the content of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this change start effect determination process, the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode of each of the specific suggestion effect and the specific advance notice effect [special mode] are determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands (holding storage number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol. , An effect control pattern for executing the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol based on the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect). A collection of data) is set, and an effect to be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIGS. 11-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific advance notice effect is being executed (step S21TM2000). That is, it is determined whether or not the specific display of the notice mode is displayed. If the specific advance notice effect is not being executed (NO in step S01TM2000), the process ends as it is. That is, when the specific display of the notice mode is not displayed, neither the specific suggestion effect nor the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed in the variable display.

When the specific advance notice effect is being executed (YES in step S01TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead counter is 0 (step S01TM2010). If the value of the look-ahead counter is not 0 (NO in step S01TM2010), the process ends as it is. That is, even when the specific display of the notice mode is displayed, the specific suggestion effect and the specific notice effect [special] are used in the variable display before the target variable display that is the target of the specific advance effect. Aspects] will not be executed.

When the value of the look-ahead counter is 0 (YES in step S01TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the fluctuation display is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether it is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" (step S01TM2020). If the display result of the fluctuation display is neither "2R normal jackpot" nor "10R probability variation jackpot" (NO in step S01TM2020), the process ends as it is. That is, even when the specific display of the notice mode is displayed and the change display that is the target of the specific notice effect is executed, the display result of the change of the target is "2R normal". When neither "big hit" nor "10R probability variation big hit" is performed, neither the specific suggestion effect nor the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed.

When the display result of the variation display is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" (YES in step S01TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in each hold (each pending variation). (Display), it is determined based on the symbol designation command whether or not the determination result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot" (step S01TM2030).

For any of the reserved memories, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is not "10R probability variation jackpot" (NO in step S01TM2030), the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. It is determined based on the table (see FIGS. 11-10 (A1) and (A2)) for determining whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect (step S01TM2040), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (A1), in the table referred to when the display result of the variation display is "2R normal jackpot", whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed according to the set value. And the determination value for determining the effect mode is assigned.

When the setting value is "1" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "1"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 55%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 35%.

When the set value is "2" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 35%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value is "3" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "3"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 55%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 35%.

When the setting value is "4" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "4"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 35%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value is "5" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "5"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. It was decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 53%, and it was decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 35%, and it was decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 2%. Decide to perform a specific suggestion effect.

When the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. Decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 35%, decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 53%, and decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 2% Decide to perform a specific suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A2), in the table referred to when the display result of the fluctuation display is "10R probability variation jackpot", the specific suggestion effect is produced according to the set value. Judgment values for determining the presence / absence of execution and the mode of production are assigned.

When the set value is "1" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 50%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 30%.

When the set value is "2" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 30%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 50%.

When the setting value is "3" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "3"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 50%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 30%.

When the set value is "4" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "4"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 30%, and to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 50%.

When the set value is "5" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "5"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. Decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 48%, decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 30%, and decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 2% Decide to perform a specific suggestion effect.

When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the specific suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. Decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 30%, decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 48%, and decided to execute the specific suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 2% Decide to perform a specific suggestion effect.

In this way, when the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "1", "3", and "5". In the case of), the ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode (specific suggestion) is higher than the ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100B of the red mode (the ratio of executing the specific suggestion effect [red mode]). The rate at which the effect [blue mode] is executed) is higher. On the other hand, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "2", "4", and "6". In some cases), the ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100B in the red mode (the ratio of executing the specific suggestion effect [blue mode]) rather than the ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode (specific suggestion effect [blue mode]). The rate at which [red aspect] is executed) is higher.

Therefore, the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] in which the specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode is displayed suggests that the set value is an odd number (the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5"). It is a production. Further, the specific suggestion effect [red mode] in which the specific display 01TM100B of the red mode is displayed suggests that the set value is an even number (the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6"). It is a production. As described above, the specific suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Further, when the set value is any of "1", "2", "3", and "4" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "2", "3". , "4"), the ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100C of the golden mode (the ratio of executing the specific suggestion effect [gold mode]) is 0%. On the other hand, when the set value is either "5" or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is either "5" or "6"), it is gold. The ratio of displaying the specific display 01TM100C of the mode (the ratio of executing the specific suggestion effect [golden mode]) is 2%.

Therefore, in the specific suggestion effect [golden mode] in which the specific display 01TM100C of the golden mode is displayed, the set value is either "5" or "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value designation command is "5". , Any one of "6") is suggested (notified). In particular, in this example, since the specific display 01TM100C in the golden aspect is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "5" and "6" (high set value). As described above, the specific suggestion effect is a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is a high set value.

As described above, the specific suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number, and is also a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is a high set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A2), when the display result of the variation display is "10R probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the specific suggestion effect is executed is [100-20 = 80%]. As shown in FIG. 11-10 (A1), when the display result of the variation display is "2R normal jackpot", the ratio at which the specific suggestion effect is executed is [100-10 = 90%].

In this way, the specific suggestion effect is performed when the display result of the variation display is "2R normal jackpot" rather than the ratio at which the specific suggestion effect is executed when the display result of the variation display is "10R probability variation jackpot". Is executed at a higher rate. When winning a 2R normal jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types, by increasing the execution rate of the specific suggestion effect, compared to when winning the 10R probability variation jackpot, which is advantageous to the player among the jackpot types. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to winning the 2R normal jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when the display result of the variation display is "2R normal jackpot", the execution rate of the specific suggestion effect is higher than when the display result of the variation display is "10R probability variation jackpot". However, not limited to such a form, when the display result of the variation display is "10R probability variation jackpot", it is more specific than when the display result of the variation display is "2R normal jackpot". The execution rate of the suggestion effect may be increased.

Further, the display result of the fluctuation display is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" (YES in step S01TM2020), and the determination result at the start winning is "10R probability variation" for any of the reserved memories. If it is not a "big hit" (NO in step S01TM2030), it may be decided not to execute the specific suggestion effect. As described above, even if the display result of the variation display is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot", the specific suggestion effect is not executed and the specific display of the suggestion mode is not displayed (in the notice mode). It may not change from the specific display to the specific display of the suggestion mode).

On the other hand, in step S01TM2030, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot" for any of the reserved memories (any of the pending fluctuation displays) (YES in step S01TM2030), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed based on a table (see FIG. 11-10 (B)) for determining whether or not the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed (step). S01TM2050), the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the specific advance notice effect [special mode], determination values for determining whether or not the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed are assigned. In this example, it is decided not to execute the specific advance notice effect [special mode] at a rate of 50%, and it is decided to execute the specific notice effect [special aspect] at a rate of 50%.

In this way, in the specific advance notice effect [special mode] in which the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed, the display result of the variable display is "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot", and either of the reserved memories is stored. This is an effect that can be executed when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot". That is, the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is an effect suggesting that the jackpot expectation of the variable display (variable display whose execution is suspended) in which the start condition is satisfied but the disclosure condition is not satisfied is high. There is. In particular, in this example, since the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed, it is confirmed that the display result of any of the variable displays for which the variable display execution is suspended is "10R probability variable jackpot". To do. Therefore, the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is a hold continuous effect that suggests (notifies) that the hold memory of any of the variable display and variable display has won the jackpot.

Fluctuation display When the display result of the fluctuation display is "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot", and the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot" for any of the reserved memories. However, since the specific notice effect [special mode] is not executed at a rate of 50% of the variable display, even if the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is not displayed, the variable display jackpot for which the variable display execution is suspended is suspended. It does not mean that the degree of expectation is 0%, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the sense of expectation for the variable display for which the variable display execution is suspended.

(Example of production of specific notice production and specific suggestion production)
Next, when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state, the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed over a plurality of variations, and the specific suggestion effect is performed after the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the target variation display. An example of the effect of executing the above will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13.

11-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the specific advance notice effect and the specific suggestion effect, and FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 are effects related to the specific advance notice effect and the specific suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an image.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variation display of the second special symbol (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-11), the effect control CPU 120 , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol (2nd small symbol (2) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5). The variable display of (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 2. Therefore, "2" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 01TM031 displays the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM021 displays two second hold displays 01TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (2), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (T2 shown in FIG. 11-11). (At the timing), it is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B and the second reserved memory number becomes 3. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM020 in the second hold display area 01TM021 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning, which occurs at this time (step S01TM1040), and sets the look-ahead counter. (Step S01TM1060). At this time, 3 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 3. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-11), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“163” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second is The combination of the two small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (in this example, "163") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second small symbol) is started. The variable display of (information corresponding to the special symbol) has been started (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 11-11).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 01TM030 in the active display area 01TM031 and the second hold displayed in the second hold display area 01TM021 as the number of second hold storages becomes 2. The display 01TM020 is shifted one by one to the active display area 01TM031 side, and "2" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025. Further, 2 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific advance notice effect [normal mode], and displays the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode on the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The specific display 01TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-11), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“254” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second is The combination of the two small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (in this example, "254") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is moved to the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the state where the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is started (T6 shown in FIGS. 11-11). Timing).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 01TM030 in the active display area 01TM031 and the second hold displayed in the second hold display area 01TM021 as the number of second hold storages becomes 1. The display 01TM020 is shifted one by one to the active display area 01TM031 side, and "1" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025. Further, 1 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 11-11), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“723” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second is The combination of the two small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (in this example, "723") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Here, in this example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] in the variation open effect determination process that is executed when the target variation display is started. (Step S01TM2040).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (8), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is moved to the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the state where the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is started (T8 shown in FIGS. 11-11). Timing).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 01TM030 in the active display area 01TM031 and the second hold displayed in the second hold display area 01TM021 as the number of second hold storage becomes 0. The display 01TM020 is erased, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025. Further, 0 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0. That is, the variable display becomes the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect.

After that, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display (target fluctuation display) to the establishment of the reach state, four new start prizes are generated for the winning ball device 6B (T9 shown in FIGS. 11-11). , T10, T11, T12 timing), and it is assumed that the second reserved storage number is 4. Further, regarding the four starting prizes (T9, T10, T11, T12) that occurred during this period, it is assumed that the judgment results at the time of starting winning are all "missing". That is, it is assumed that the determination result at the time of the start winning prize specified by the symbol designation command is "missing" for any of the four second reserved memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (9), the effect control CPU 120 has a symbol of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 11-11). The decorative symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is continued. That is, also in the second small symbol display area 5l2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5r2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The second small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a second reserved storage number of 4, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 01TM031 displays the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM021 displays four second hold displays 01TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (10), after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the timing of developing into super reach in the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T14 shown in FIG. 11-11). The specific display 01TM100 in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the device 5 is erased (the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is terminated), and the battle effect [victory] is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is made to display the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060 on the image display device 5 (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 11-11). , The character "victory" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the combination of the second small symbols (“777” in this example) to be stopped and displayed (swinged) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. ..

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] in response to the notification that the display result is a "big hit" (timing of T15 shown in FIGS. 11-11). In the specific suggestion effect [blue mode], the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The specific display 01TM100A is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (12), the effect control in which the symbol confirmation designation command is received at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T16 shown in FIG. 11-11). The CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“777” in this example) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. Let me. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result is "big hit" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (13), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the fanfare command that specifies the display of the effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state ends the specific suggestion effect [blue mode]. The blue mode specific display 01TM100A in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is erased (hidden), and the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 is notified that the 10R probability variation jackpot has been won. Display the characters "BIG BONUS" (timing of T17 shown in FIGS. 11-11).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is continuously executed over the variable display a plurality of times (for example, three times). Once the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the period during which the variation display is not executed before the target variation display is started (FIG. 11). Including the period T5 to T6 and the period T7 to T8 shown in -11), the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning effect determination process (step S01TM1040), a plurality of before the target variable display is executed. A specific advance notice effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect over a period in which the variation display of the times is executed and a period in which the target variation display is executed (the period from T4 to T14 shown in FIGS. 11-11) [normal mode] Is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (4) to 11-13 (9), the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] in the effect determination process at the start of the variation when the target variation display is started (step S01TM2040), the second During the period from when the small symbol is stopped (stopped swinging) to when the big hit fanfare effect is started (until the fanfare command is received) (the period from T15 to T17 shown in FIGS. 11-11), the specific suggestion effect is produced. [Blue mode] is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (11) and (12), the specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, the specific advance notice effect is executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the specific suggestion effect is executed after the specific advance notice effect in the variable display that is the target of the specific advance notice effect. Along with this, the specific display in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen is changed from the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode) to the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode). According to such a configuration, it is possible to foretell that a big hit will occur (control to an advantageous state) by the specific display at the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, and to suggest the set value. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the specific display in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, and the interest of the production using the specific display can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 (11) to (12), after the specific advance notice effect is executed, from the stop display (swing stop) of the second small symbol to the start of the big hit fanfare effect ( During the period (until the fanfare command is received), the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in the blue mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (13), when the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state (when the jackpot fanfare effect is started), the specific suggestion effect ends, and the specific suggestion mode is displayed (blue mode is specified). Display 01TM100A) is hidden. In this way, based on being controlled to the jackpot game state (fanfare effect, effect during the round, interval effect between rounds, ending effect are executed), the effect can be produced by ending the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent complication and reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific suggestion effect is not executed during the period controlled to the jackpot game state, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is not displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. However, not limited to such a form, the specific suggestion effect can be executed during the period controlled by the jackpot game state, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. It may be possible to make it.

Specifically, the period from when the second small symbol is stopped and displayed (swinging stop) to when the big hit fanfare effect is started (until the fanfare command is received) and the period when the big hit game state is controlled. The specific suggestion effect may be continuously executed for at least a part of the period. For example, the period from the stop display (swing stop) of the second small symbol to the end of the jackpot game state (the period until the end of the jackpot ending effect), the upper right part of the screen and the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The unit may continuously display the specific display of the suggestion mode. According to such a configuration, the period during which the specific display of the suggestion mode is displayed becomes long, so that the player recognizes that the specific display is the suggestion mode and sets the setting value suggested by the specific display. It becomes easy to grasp.

Here, since the set value of the game machine is information that the player is extremely interested in, when the specific suggestion effect is executed, the player interrupts the game and uses an imaging device such as a smartphone owned by the player. There is a case where a specific display which is a suggestion mode is imaged.

If the period during which the specific suggestion effect can be executed is limited to the period from when the second small symbol is stopped and displayed (rocking stop) to when the big hit fanfare effect is started (until the fanfare command is received), The player is unaware that the specific display is a suggestive mode and is likely to overlook it. Further, even if it is noticed that the specific display is the suggestion mode, it is difficult to secure the imaging time for imaging the specific display which is the suggestion mode.

However, even during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, by continuously executing the specific suggestion effect (continuing to display the specific display of the suggestion mode), the player can use the specific display as the suggestion mode. It becomes easy to recognize that, and it is possible to secure time for capturing the specific display which is the suggestion mode.

If the image captured by the player in this way is an image in a state in which a high setting value is suggested, the image is uploaded to a website such as a social networking service (SNS). As a result, the effect of attracting customers to the game hall where the game machine is installed can be enhanced. That is, securing a period necessary for the player to image the specific display of the suggestion mode can also contribute to enhancing the operation of the game machine in the game field.

(Example of production of specific notice production [special mode])
Next, when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state, the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed over a plurality of variations, and the specific suggestion effect is performed after the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the target variation display. 11-14 and 11-15 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed in the jackpot game state without executing.

11-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] and the specific advance notice effect [special aspect], and FIGS. 11-15 show the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect] and the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect]. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to the specific notice effect [special aspect].

In this example, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning prize determination process (step S01TM1040). In addition, when starting the variable display that is the target of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode], one of the variable displays whose execution is suspended (for example, the variable display immediately after the targeted variable display). ), It is assumed that it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [special mode] in the variable open time effect determination process based on the judgment result at the start winning prize being "10R probability variation jackpot" (step). S01TM2050).

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (1), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the target variable display, and the upper right part of the screen and the screen of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the lower left. The effect control CPU 120 displays "7" on the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 11-14). By stopping and displaying the symbol, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variation display of the second small symbol is executed. That is, also in the second small symbol display area 5l2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5r2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The second small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a second reserved storage number of 4, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 01TM031 displays the active display 01TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM021 displays four second hold displays 01TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (2), after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the timing of developing the super reach in the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-14). The specific display 01TM100 in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the device 5 is erased (the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is terminated), and the battle effect [victory] is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is made to display the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM050 and the enemy character 01TM060 on the image display device 5 (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-14). , The character "victory" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the combination of the second small symbols (“777” in this example) to be stopped and displayed (swinged) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (4), the effect control in which the symbol confirmation designation command is received at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-14). The CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“777” in this example) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. Let me. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result is "big hit" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (5), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the fanfare command that specifies the display of the effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state starts the specific advance notice effect [special mode]. The special display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed on the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 is of "BIG BONUS" that notifies that the 10R probability variation jackpot has been won. Characters are displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 11-14).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 receives the display designation command during opening of the big winning opening in the big hit game state in which the big hit type is "10R probability variation big hit". The characters "Round 1" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 as an effect during the first round (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 11-14). In addition, based on the fact that 15 x 10 balls x 4 rounds = 600 prize balls were given in the big hit game of the 4R probability variation big hit that triggered the control to the high accuracy / high base state immediately before. Characters such as "600pt" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 as a number display. At this time, the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is continuously displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the 2nd to 10th rounds, and a notification command after the opening of the 10th large winning opening (a command for notifying that the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state). Is received.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect during the 10th round and displays the jackpot end image 01TM200 notifying that the jackpot game state has ended (shown in FIG. 11-14). Period from T7 to T8). In this jackpot end image 01TM200, the characters "Total" displayed in the upper left part of the screen, the number of prize balls displayed in the center of the screen (characters "2100pt" in this example), and the characters displayed in the lower right part of the screen are displayed. The characters "BIG BONUS" and the number of jackpots displayed (in this example, the characters "x1") are included. At this time, the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is continuously displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (8), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state after the end of the big hit game state and the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect is also produced. The control CPU 120 continuously displays the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode on the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In this state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and also starts the variation display of the image. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is started (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 11-14). Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5 In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Here, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 01TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is As the result becomes 3, the active display 01TM030 is displayed in the active display area 01TM031, and the second hold display 01TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 01TM021 is shifted one by one to the active display area 01TM031 side. "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 01TM025.

When it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning determination process (step S01TM1040), a plurality of variation displays before the target variation display is executed and a target variation display. Based on the execution of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode], as shown in FIG. 11-15 (1), the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Specific display 01TM100 is displayed. In addition, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation when starting the target variation display, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot" for any of the reserved storage (holding variation display). Yes (YES in step 01TM2030), when it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [special mode] (step S01TM2050), the specific advance notice effect [special aspect] is executed during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. Based on the above, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (5) to (7), the special display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. According to such a configuration, there is a plurality of periods in which the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode, specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) may be displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific display of the notice mode).

In the present embodiment, the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed when the big hit game state of "10R probability variation big hit" is started, and the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is also performed during the period controlled by the big hit game state. The specific advance notice effect [special mode] will be continuously executed even during the period in which the variable display is continuously executed in the high accuracy / high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. This specific notice effect [special mode] shall end with the end of the variable display that is the target of the specific notice effect [special mode].

That is, the specific display 01TM100F of the special aspect is displayed at the timing when the jackpot gaming state of "10R probability variation jackpot" is started (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 11-14), and the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state ( It continues even during the period (the period from T5 to T8 shown in FIG. 11-14) and the period during which the variation display is executed in the high accuracy / high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (the period after T8 shown in FIG. 11-14). (At the timing when the second small symbol is fixed and stopped) when the variation display (variation display whose display result is "10R probability variation jackpot"), which is the target of the specific advance notice effect [special mode], is completed. Yes, it will be displayed continuously until the next (holding ream) "10R probability variation big hit" big hit game state start timing). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the specific display can be improved, and the interest of the production using the specific display can be improved.

(Change pattern of specific display)
[Change pattern (i)]
When it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning prize determination process (step S01TM1040), as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (4) to 11-13 (9), the specific advance notice effect [ The normal mode] is executed, and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation when starting the target variation display, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is not "10R probability variation jackpot" for any of the reserved memories (held variation display). Based on (NO in step S01TM2030), if it is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect (step S01TM2040), the specific suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (11) and (12). The specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. That is, the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 are examples of [change pattern (i)] in which the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode.

[Change pattern (ii)]
Further, when it is determined to execute the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] in the start winning prize determination process (step S01TM1040), the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect] is executed as shown in FIG. 11-15 (1). , The specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation when starting the target fluctuation display, the judgment result at the time of starting winning for any of the reserved memories (held fluctuation display) is "10R probability variation jackpot". Based on (YES in step S01TM2030), when it is decided to execute the specific advance notice effect [special mode] (step S01TM2050), as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (5) to (8), the specific advance notice effect [Special mode] is executed, and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-15, the specific display is changed from the first notice mode (normal mode) to the second notice mode (special mode) [change pattern (ii)] (from the notice mode to the suggestion mode). This is an example of a pattern that does not change).

As described above, the change pattern [change pattern (i)] that changes the specific display from the notice mode to the suggestion mode and the change pattern that does not change the specific display from the notice mode to the suggestion mode [change pattern (ii)]. By providing the above, the player can pay attention to whether or not the mode of the specific display changes from the notice mode to the suggestion mode, and the interest of the production using the specific display can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the period from the stop display (swing stop) of the combination of the second small symbols to the start of the big hit fanfare effect (until the fanfare command is received). , The specific advance notice effect [special mode] has described an example of being executed during the period of the jackpot game state, but the specific suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the combination of the second small symbols is stopped and displayed (swinging). It may be executed in a period different from the period from the stop) to the start of the jackpot fanfare effect (until the fanfare command is received), and the specific advance notice effect [special mode] may be performed in the jackpot game state. It may be executed in a period different from the period. For example, the big hit fanfare effect is started after the combination of the second small symbols is stopped and displayed (rocking stop) in the variable display targeted by the specific advance effect [special mode] and the specific advance effect [normal mode]. It may be executed during the period until (until the fanfare command is received), or the specific suggestion effect may be executed during the period of the jackpot game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In this case, a specific suggestion effect or a specific notice [special mode] can be executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, identification of red mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. An example is shown in which the display 01TM100B, the specific display of the golden mode 01TM100C) or the specific display of the special mode (specific display 01TM100F of the special mode) can be displayed, but the specific notice effect [normal mode] is not limited to such a form. Even if it is not executed and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) is not displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the specific suggestion effect or the specific notice [special Aspects] may be executed, and the suggestion mode specific display (blue mode specific display 01TM100A, red mode specific display 01TM100B, gold mode specific display 01TM100C) may be executed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, a special mode specific display (special mode specific display 01TM100F) may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which [change pattern (i)] and [change pattern (ii)] are provided as change patterns of the specific display mode is shown, but the present invention is limited to such a form. Instead, other change patterns may be provided. For example, as another change pattern, one or more of the following [change pattern (iii)] to [change pattern (viii)] may be provided.

[Change pattern (iii)]
In this [change pattern (iii)], after the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed and the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the specific suggestion effect is displayed. It is a change pattern in which none of the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed, and the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is hidden as it is without changing (the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is erased). That is, the [change pattern (iii)] is a change pattern that does not change the specific display from the first prior notice mode (normal mode).

[Change pattern (iv)]
In the above embodiment, after the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect] is executed, only one of the specific suggestion effect and the specific advance notice effect [special aspect] is executed, and the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect] is executed. An example is shown in which the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is not executed when the specific suggestion effect is executed later, but the specific advance notice effect [normal] is not limited to such a form, as in the [change pattern (iv)]. When the specific suggestion effect is executed after the mode] is executed, the specific notice effect [special mode] may be further executed after that.

In this change pattern (iv), the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and after the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the specific suggestion effect is executed. Then, the specific display of the suggestion mode (blue mode specific display 01TM100A, red mode specific display 01TM100B, golden mode specific display 01TM100C) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and then specified. This is a change pattern in which the advance notice effect [special mode] is executed, and the specific display 01TM100 of the special mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. That is, the [change pattern (iv)] is a change pattern in which the specific display is changed from the first notice mode (normal mode) to the suggestion mode and then changed to the second notice mode (special mode).

[Change pattern (v)]
In this [change pattern (v)], the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and after the specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the specific notice effect is displayed. [Special mode] is executed, the specific display 01TM100F of the special mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the specific suggestion effect [special mode] is executed, and the image display device 5 It is a change pattern in which the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode, specific display 01TM100C in gold mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen. That is, the [change pattern (v)] is a change pattern in which the specific display is changed from the first notice mode (normal mode) to the second notice mode (special mode) and then changed to the suggestion mode.

[Change pattern (vi)]
In this [change pattern (vi)], the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display of the golden mode 01TM100C) is not executed, and neither the specific notice effect [normal mode] nor the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode is not displayed as it is. It is a change pattern (the specific display of the suggestion mode is erased). That is, the [change pattern (vi)] is a change pattern that does not change the specific display from the suggested mode.

[Change pattern (vii)]
In this [change pattern (vii)], the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display 01TM100C) of the golden mode is displayed, and then the specific notice effect [normal mode] or the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed, and the notice mode is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. It is a change pattern (vii) in which a specific display (specific display 01TM100 in a normal mode, specific display 01TM100F in a special mode) is displayed. That is, the [change pattern (vii)] is a change pattern that changes the specific display from the suggestion mode to the notice mode (first notice mode or second notice mode).

[Change pattern (viii)]
In this [change pattern (viii)], a specific suggestion effect is executed, and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A in blue mode, specific display 01TM100B in red mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. , The specific display of the golden mode 01TM100C) is displayed, and then the specific notice effect [normal mode] is executed, and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display of the normal mode) is displayed on the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. 01TM100) is displayed, then the specific notice effect [special mode] is executed, and the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the special mode) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. It is a change pattern. That is, the [change pattern (viii)] is a change pattern in which the specific display is changed from the suggestion mode to the first notice mode (normal mode) and then changed to the second notice mode (special mode).

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the production mode of the specific advance notice effect that can be executed during the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state (for example, the period during which the variable display is executed in the high accuracy / high base state). Is shown only in the normal mode (only in the mode in which the character "CHANGE" is included in the specific display), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the jackpot game state is not controlled (for example, high accuracy / high) is shown. A plurality of production modes may be provided as the production mode of the specific advance notice effect that can be executed during the period (the period during which the variable display is executed in the base state).

For example, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing", the specific display including the characters "CHANGE" is displayed at a rate of 4% instead of displaying the specific display at a rate of 95%, and 1%. When the specific display including the characters "BIG CHANCE" is displayed at the rate of, and the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit", the specific display is not displayed at the rate of 70% and 10%. The specific display including the characters "CHANGE" may be displayed at a rate of 20%, and the specific display including the characters "BIG CHANGE" may be displayed at a rate of 20%. That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the specific display including the characters "BIG CHANCE" is displayed than when the specific display including the characters "CHANGE" is displayed. In addition, the effect pattern that does not change from the specific display including the characters "CHANGE" to the specific display including the characters "BIG CHANGE" and the specific display including the characters "CHANGE" to the specific display including the characters "BIG CHANGE" An effect pattern to be changed may be provided.

Here, as illustrated in FIGS. 11-12, 11-13, and 11-15, in the present embodiment, when the specific suggestion effect is being executed, the mode of the specific suggestion effect (specific display). The aspect) includes an aspect of the specific advance notice effect (for example, the characters “CHANGE”) executed before that. With such an effect configuration, the player can grasp that the specific advance notice effect has been executed before the specific suggestion effect is executed. Then, as in the present modification (1), when there are "CHANGE" and "BIG CHANGE" as the mode of the specific notice effect, the mode of the specific notice effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed. Can also be grasped.

That is, in the specific suggestion effect, the specific display (characters of "CHANGE") is displayed in a blue mode based on the specific display including the characters of "CHANGE" related to the specific notice effect executed before the specific display. , It may be displayed in a red mode, or it may be displayed in a gold mode. Further, in the specific suggestion effect, the specific display (characters of "BIG CHANGE") is displayed in blue mode based on the specific display including the characters of "BIG CHANGE" related to the specific advance notice effect executed before that. There are cases where it is displayed in a red mode and cases where it is displayed in a gold mode. In this way, the mode of the specific suggestion effect is determined based on the mode of the specific notice effect executed before that (the mode of the specific suggestion effect is the mode of the specific notice effect executed before that). (By being reflected), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit while diversifying the production mode of the specific suggestion production, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific suggestion production.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, the mode of the specific suggestion effect is not limited to the mode corresponding to the mode of the specific advance notice effect executed before the specific suggestion effect, and is executed before the specific suggestion effect. The mode of the specific notice effect may not be reflected. For example, the characters "CHANGE" and "BIG CHANGE" related to the specific advance notice effect may not be displayed (not included in the specific display) in the specific suggestion effect executed thereafter.

(2) In the above embodiment, the specific advance notice effect is executed before the variation display corresponding to the start prize is started based on the determination result at the time of the start prize, and the variation display corresponding to the start prize ( An example of continuous execution even in the target variable display) was explained. That is, an example has been described in which the specific advance notice effect is a pre-reading advance notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended, and also a advance notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display being executed. Not limited to such a form, the specific advance notice effect is a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended, but is not a advance notice effect that announces the display result of the variable display that is being executed. , May be. Further, the specific advance notice effect may not be an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended, but a notice effect of announcing the display result of the variable display being executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a specific advance notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display whose execution is suspended, but a type different from the specific advance notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed. For example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the start prize may be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start prize.

Then, when the specific notice effect is being executed (when the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is displayed), the execution ratio of the hold change effect is when the specific notice effect is not executed (the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode). It may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the hold change effect (when is not displayed). Further, the execution rate of the specific advance notice effect when the hold change effect is executed may be higher than the execution rate of the specific advance notice effect when the hold change effect is not executed. According to such an effect configuration, the effect of the pre-reading advance notice effect can be enhanced by increasing the ratio of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading advance notice effects including the specific advance notice effect in parallel.

Further, based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, the pending change effect and the specific advance notice effect may be executed in parallel with the variation display corresponding to the start prize as a common target. Then, the specific notice effect may be continuously executed even after the hold change effect is finished, and even after the specific notice effect is finished (even when the specific notice effect is finished and the specific suggestion effect is executed). The hold notice effect may be continuously executed. With such an effect configuration, the other look-ahead notice effect can be continued even after the end of one look-ahead advance notice effect, so that the player's interest is reduced by the end of one look-ahead advance notice effect. Can be suppressed. In particular, even when the specific notice effect is completed and the specific suggestion effect is executed, the hold change effect targeting the variable display targeted by the specific notice effect is continued, so that the specific notice effect is continued. It is possible to pay attention to the specific suggestion effect performed in the common area with the specific advance notice effect while not reducing the player's interest that has been improved by the effect.

That is, when the specific notice effect and the hold change effect corresponding to the start prize (corresponding to the common variable display that is the target) are executed based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize, the specific notice effect ends. After that, the hold change effect may be continued, and the hold change effect may be continued even after the specific suggestion effect is executed.

Further, when the specific notice effect is not executed (when the specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode is not displayed), the execution rate of the hold change effect is when the specific notice effect is executed (specific display 01TM100 in the normal mode). It may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the hold change effect (when is displayed). Further, the execution ratio of the specific advance notice effect when the hold change effect is not executed may be higher than the execution ratio of the specific advance notice effect when the hold change effect is executed. According to such an effect configuration, by reducing the ratio of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading advance notice effects in parallel including a specific advance notice effect, it is possible to suppress the control burden of the pre-reading advance notice effect and to suppress the control burden of the plurality of types. By executing the look-ahead advance notice effect in parallel, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp each effect, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the effect of the effect is reduced.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode of the specific suggestion effect is not changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mode of the specific suggestion effect may be changed. For example, when it is decided to execute the specific suggestion effect in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the first aspect and the second aspect are determined as the effect mode of the specific suggestion effect, and the specific suggestion effect of the first aspect is performed. After the execution, the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect may be executed. For example, the specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode is displayed based on the fact that the effect pattern for executing the specific suggestion effect [golden mode] is determined after the specific suggestion effect [blue mode] is executed in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. After that, the specific display 01TM100C in the golden aspect may be displayed.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific suggestion effect can be executed when the display result of the target variation display is either "2R normal jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" has been described. , Not limited to such a form, a specific suggestion effect may be executed when the display result of the target variable display is "off".

(6) Further, when the display result of the variable display is an unfavorable display result, the specific suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the display result is advantageous. For example, the execution rate of the specific suggestion effect is the lowest when the display result of the target variation display is "10R probability variation jackpot", and the second lowest when the display result is "2R normal jackpot", and is "missing". In the case of, it may be the highest. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player and motivate the player to continue the game.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the display areas corresponding to both the specific notice effect and the specific suggestion effect are the strip-shaped display areas (specific display) at the upper right and lower left of the screen. The display area corresponding to both of these effects may be other objects displayed on the screen, for example, a title image displayed at the upper end of the screen (specific notice effect and specific). It may be an image in which the title characters are different from those in the suggestion effect) or a background image (an image in which the background pattern and the background color are different between the specific advance notice effect and the specific suggestion effect).

(8) In the above embodiment, when the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] and the specific suggestion effect are executed, the period from the end of the specific advance notice effect [normal aspect] to the start of the specific suggestion effect (FIG. An example of temporarily hiding the specific display is shown in the period (T14 to T15) shown in 11-11, but the specific display is not limited to such a form, and the specific suggestion is made after the specific notice effect [normal mode] is completed. During the period until the start of the effect (the period from T14 to T15 shown in FIGS. 11-11), the specific display may be continuously displayed without being temporarily hidden. Specifically, the specific display is continuously displayed without being temporarily hidden, and the specific display is switched from the normal mode to the suggestive mode (any of the blue mode, the red mode, and the golden mode) (specific notice effect [ The normal mode] and the specific suggestion effect are continuously executed).

(9) In the above embodiment, an example of ending the specific suggestion effect at the timing when the big hit game state is started (for example, at the timing when the fanfare command is received) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the big hit game is not limited to this. The specific suggestion effect may be continuously executed even after the state is started. For example, when the specific suggestion effect is in the blue mode or the red mode (when the specific display of the blue mode or the red mode is displayed), the timing when the jackpot game state is started (for example, the timing when the fanfare command is received). When the specific suggestion effect is terminated (the specific display of the blue mode or the red mode is hidden), but the specific suggestion effect is the golden mode (when the specific display of the golden mode is displayed), Even during the period controlled by the jackpot game state, the specific suggestion effect of the golden mode may be continuously executed (the specific display of the golden mode is continuously displayed). Since the specific display 01TM100C of the golden aspect is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is either "5" or "6" (high set value), and the player's motivation to play is extremely high. In such a case, the specific display 01TM100C in the golden mode is continuously displayed even during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled.

(10) In the above embodiment, in the effect determination process at the start of the variation when the variation display, which is the target of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode], is started, any of the reserved storages (any of the pending variations) is performed. Regarding (display), an example is shown in which it is determined whether or not the determination result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot" (step S01TM2030), and whether or not the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed is determined. Not limited to such a form, any of the reserved memories (1) during the period controlled to the big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display which is the target of the specific advance notice effect [normal mode] becomes "big hit". For any of the pending variable displays), it may be determined whether or not the determination result at the time of starting winning is "10R probability variation jackpot", and whether or not the specific advance notice effect [special mode] is executed may be determined. ..

(11) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the set value of the game machine has been described, but the setting suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the power source of the game machine is used for the setting suggestion effect. It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when it is turned on. For example, when the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is not controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on. A predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case.

(12) As the above-mentioned specific suggestion effect or a different type of setting suggestion effect from the above-mentioned specific suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the background image may be executed. 11-16 (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of such a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. ..

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value designation command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the set value designation command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 11-16 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-16 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 11-16 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 11-16 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 11-16 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the set value designation command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command for designating the setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value by storing the set value specified by the received set value designation command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 11-16 (4), the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". For each case, the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 11-16 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 11-16 (2), and the figure. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 11-16 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the set value specified by the received set value specification command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). Further, when the set value specified by the received set value specification command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of "sunny" shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the mode, and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 30%). Further, when the set value specified by the received set value specification command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of "sunny" shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the mode, and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(13) Not limited to the relationship between the set value and the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (4), a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different accuracy regarding the setting may be executed. .. For example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of executing the first setting suggestion effect in which the background image is the first background image (for example, the image of "typhoon") is 25%, and the background image is The ratio of the second setting suggestion effect that becomes the second background image (for example, the image of "thunderstorm") is 10%, and any type of setting suggestion effect of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect can be used. When the ratio of not being executed is 65% and the setting value is "2" or more, the first setting suggestion effect in which the background image is the first background image (for example, the image of "typhoon") is executed. The ratio is 30%, and the ratio of executing the second setting suggestion effect in which the background image is the second background image (for example, the image of "lightning") is 50%, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed. It is assumed that the ratio of not executing any type of setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect is 20%.

When such an effect configuration is adopted, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are both effects suggesting that the set value is "2" or more, but the first setting suggestion The ratio that the set value of the game machine is "2" or more when the second setting suggestion effect is executed is higher than the ratio that the set value of the game machine is "2" or more when the effect is executed. Will be higher. That is, the setting value suggested by the second setting suggestion effect is the actual setting of the game machine, rather than the ratio of the setting value suggested by the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the actual setting value of the game machine. The percentage corresponding to the value is higher. In this way, both of the two types of setting suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion may be executed as the above-mentioned specific suggestion effects, and one of the two types of setting suggestion effects may be executed as the above-mentioned specific suggestion effects. Then, the other may be executed as a setting suggestion effect different from the specific suggestion effect. Further, both of the two types of setting suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion may be executed as the setting suggestion effects different from the above-mentioned specific suggestion effects.

Further, as described above, for the two types of setting suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion, one setting suggestion effect and the other setting suggestion effect may be executed in different periods. For example, one setting suggestion effect (with low accuracy of setting suggestion) is executed within the period of the ending effect accompanying the end of the jackpot game state, and the other (high accuracy of setting suggestion) setting suggestion effect. May be executed within the period of the variable display at which the high base state ends. In addition, one of the setting suggestion effects (the accuracy of the setting suggestion is low) is executed during the period controlled by the jackpot game state of the jackpot type of the probability variation jackpot, and the other (the accuracy of the setting suggestion is high). The setting suggestion effect may be executed during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state of the normal jackpot type. In addition, one (low accuracy of setting suggestion) setting suggestion effect is executed during the period controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, and the other (high accuracy of setting suggestion) setting suggestion effect. May be executed during the period controlled by the low accuracy / low base state.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 effect display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 effect control CPU

Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in the case of a game machine as in Cited Document 1, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work can be appropriately executed. There wasn't.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing setting confirmation work .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
A normal variable display means that variably displays the normal identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result, the normal variable means in which the game medium can pass through the specific area and the normal variable means.
Passable time measuring means for measuring the passable period during which the normally variable means can pass, and
A special variable display means that can display the variable display result by variable display of the special identification information,
A special variable display timekeeping means that measures the special variable display period for variable display of special identification information,
Equipped with an external output means that can output a specific signal to the outside of the game machine ,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the passable period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state ends. The timekeeping of the passable period is interrupted until the time is completed, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timekeeping of the passable period is restarted.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the special variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted.
The external output means can output the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in JP-A-2010-201002 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and it corresponds to the setting value before and after the setting change. A game machine that displays a character image has been proposed. For a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (FIG. 12), when an effect of suggesting the setting is executed. In addition, it is preferable that the player feels the interest.
The other invention of the present application has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.
(1) The gaming machines of the other inventions of the present application are
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
A game state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (specific display 01TM100, specific display 01TM100A) is provided.
The display mode of the specific display includes a notice mode (normal mode) for notifying that the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state, and a suggestion mode (blue mode) for setting suggestion.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The specific display can be displayed in a common area (upper right part of the screen and lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5) in the case of displaying in the notice mode and the case of displaying in the suggestion mode.
The specific display may be changed from one aspect of the notice mode and the suggestion mode to the other mode, or may not be changed (the specific display is changed from the notice mode to the suggestion mode [change pattern (i)). ] And [change pattern (ii)] that does not change the specific display from the notice mode to the suggestion mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the player pays attention to whether or not the mode of the specific display changes, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.
The gaming machine of means (2) is
It is a game machine of means (1) ,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display the specific display of the notice mode (specific display 01TM100 of the normal mode) and the specific display of the suggestion mode (specific display 01TM100A of the blue mode) on a common display layer (from the background image). Also has a high priority (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen by the player).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common display between the specific display of the notice mode and the specific display of the suggestion mode, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values.
A game state control means that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Equipped with a production control means that can display a specific display,
The display mode of the specific display includes a notice mode for notifying that the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state and a suggestion mode for setting suggestion.
The effect control means
The specific display can be displayed in a common area between the case of displaying in the notice mode and the case of displaying in the suggestion mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display may be changed from one aspect of the notice aspect and the suggestion aspect to the other aspect, or may not be changed.

Images